blob: bc9574221b3d18a47622107e72489ec1453759ea [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000015#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
16#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
17#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
18#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
19#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
20#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000021#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000022#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000023#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000024#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000025#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000026#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000027#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
28#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
29#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
30#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
31#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
32#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
33#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
34#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
35#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
36#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
37#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000038#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000039#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000040#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000042#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000043#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
44#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000045#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +000046#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000047#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000048#include <algorithm>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000049#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000050#include <set>
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000051using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000052using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000053
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000054#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
55
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000056static cl::opt<unsigned>
57PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(1),
58 cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 1)"));
59
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000060static cl::opt<bool>
61DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
62 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
63
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000064static cl::opt<bool>
65SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
66 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
67
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +000068static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
69 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
70 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +000071
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +000072STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000073STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +000074STATISTIC(NumLookupTablesHoles, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +000075STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +000076STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +000077
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +000078namespace {
Marcello Maggioni963bc872014-10-07 18:16:44 +000079 // The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
80 // case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the cases
81 // composing the case group.
82 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>
83 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy;
84 // The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
85 // and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the switch
86 // for that PHI.
87 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> SwitchCaseResultsTy;
88
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +000089 /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
90 struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
91 ConstantInt *Value;
92 BasicBlock *Dest;
93
94 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
95 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
96
97 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
98 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
99 return Value < RHS.Value;
100 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000101
102 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000103 };
104
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000105class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000106 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000107 unsigned BonusInstThreshold;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000108 const DataLayout *const DL;
Hal Finkel60db0582014-09-07 18:57:58 +0000109 AssumptionTracker *AT;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000110 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
111 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000112 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000113 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000114 BasicBlock *Pred,
115 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000116 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
117 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000118
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000119 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000120 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000121 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000122 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000123 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000124 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000125 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000126
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000127public:
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +0000128 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
129 const DataLayout *DL, AssumptionTracker *AT)
130 : TTI(TTI), BonusInstThreshold(BonusInstThreshold), DL(DL), AT(AT) {}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000131 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
132};
133}
134
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000135/// SafeToMergeTerminators - Return true if it is safe to merge these two
136/// terminator instructions together.
137///
138static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) {
139 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000140
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000141 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
142 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
143 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
144 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
145 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Chris Lattnerb7b75142007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000146 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000147
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000148 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
149 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
150 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000151 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
152 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
153 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
154 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))
155 return false;
156 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000157
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000158 return true;
159}
160
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000161/// isProfitableToFoldUnconditional - Return true if it is safe and profitable
162/// to merge these two terminator instructions together, where SI1 is an
163/// unconditional branch. PhiNodes will store all PHI nodes in common
164/// successors.
165///
166static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1,
167 BranchInst *SI2,
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000168 Instruction *Cond,
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000169 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) {
170 if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self!
171 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
172
173 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000174 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000175 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
176 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
177 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
178 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
179 if (!Ci2) return false;
180 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
181 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
182 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
183 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
184 return false;
185
186 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
187 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
188 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000189 for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I)
190 if (SI1Succs.count(*I))
191 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin();
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000192 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
193 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
194 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000195 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000196 return false;
197 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
198 }
199 return true;
200}
201
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000202/// AddPredecessorToBlock - Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will
203/// now be entries in it from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be
204/// flowing into the PHI nodes will be the same as those coming in from
205/// ExistPred, an existing predecessor of Succ.
206static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
207 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000208 if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000209
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000210 PHINode *PN;
211 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
212 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I)
213 PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000214}
215
David Majnemer91142c42013-06-01 19:43:23 +0000216/// ComputeSpeculationCost - Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000217/// given instruction, which is assumed to be safe to speculate. 1 means
218/// cheap, 2 means less cheap, and UINT_MAX means prohibitively expensive.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000219static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I, const DataLayout *DL) {
220 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000221 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
222 switch (Operator::getOpcode(I)) {
223 default:
224 // In doubt, be conservative.
225 return UINT_MAX;
226 case Instruction::GetElementPtr:
227 // GEPs are cheap if all indices are constant.
228 if (!cast<GEPOperator>(I)->hasAllConstantIndices())
229 return UINT_MAX;
230 return 1;
Louis Gerbarg1f54b822014-05-09 17:02:46 +0000231 case Instruction::ExtractValue:
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000232 case Instruction::Load:
233 case Instruction::Add:
234 case Instruction::Sub:
235 case Instruction::And:
236 case Instruction::Or:
237 case Instruction::Xor:
238 case Instruction::Shl:
239 case Instruction::LShr:
240 case Instruction::AShr:
241 case Instruction::ICmp:
242 case Instruction::Trunc:
243 case Instruction::ZExt:
244 case Instruction::SExt:
Matt Arsenaultc8fc08c2014-05-30 18:34:43 +0000245 case Instruction::BitCast:
246 case Instruction::ExtractElement:
247 case Instruction::InsertElement:
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000248 return 1; // These are all cheap.
249
250 case Instruction::Call:
251 case Instruction::Select:
252 return 2;
253 }
254}
255
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000256/// DominatesMergePoint - If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as
257/// accepted above, return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
258/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
259/// which works well enough for us.
260///
261/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000262/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
263/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
264/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
265/// set and true is returned.
266///
267/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
268/// Select whose cost is 2.
269///
270/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
271/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
272/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000273static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Craig Topper71b7b682014-08-21 05:55:13 +0000274 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction*> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000275 unsigned &CostRemaining,
276 const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000277 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000278 if (!I) {
279 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
280 // can be executed unconditionally.
281 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
282 if (C->canTrap())
283 return false;
284 return true;
285 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000286 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000287
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000288 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000289 // the bottom of this block.
290 if (PBB == BB) return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000291
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000292 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
293 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000294 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
295 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000296 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000297 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000298
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000299 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
300 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000301 if (!AggressiveInsts) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000302
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000303 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
304 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true;
305
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000306 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
307 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
308 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000309 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000310 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000311
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000312 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, DL);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000313
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000314 if (Cost > CostRemaining)
315 return false;
316
317 CostRemaining -= Cost;
318
319 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
320 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000321 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000322 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, DL))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000323 return false;
324 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
325 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000326 return true;
327}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000328
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000329/// GetConstantInt - Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
330/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000331static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout *DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000332 // Normal constant int.
333 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000334 if (CI || !DL || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000335 return CI;
336
337 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
338 // ConstantInt if possible.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000339 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL->getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000340
341 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
342 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
343 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
344
345 // IntToPtr const int.
346 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
347 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
348 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
349 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
350 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
351 return CI;
352 else
353 return cast<ConstantInt>
354 (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
355 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000356 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000357}
358
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000359/// GatherConstantCompares - Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together
360/// collection of icmp eq/ne instructions that compare a value against a
361/// constant, return the value being compared, and stick the constant into the
362/// Values vector.
Chris Lattner11dafaa2010-12-13 03:30:12 +0000363static Value *
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000364GatherConstantCompares(Value *V, std::vector<ConstantInt*> &Vals, Value *&Extra,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000365 const DataLayout *DL, bool isEQ, unsigned &UsedICmps) {
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000366 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000367 if (!I) return nullptr;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000368
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000369 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000370 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000371 if (ConstantInt *C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)) {
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000372 Value *RHSVal;
373 ConstantInt *RHSC;
374
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000375 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000376 // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x
377 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
378 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
379 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) {
380 APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue();
381 if (Not.isPowerOf2()) {
382 Vals.push_back(C);
383 Vals.push_back(
384 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(), C->getValue() | Not));
385 UsedICmps++;
386 return RHSVal;
387 }
388 }
389
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000390 UsedICmps++;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000391 Vals.push_back(C);
392 return I->getOperand(0);
393 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000394
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000395 // If we have "x ult 3" comparison, for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to
396 // the set.
397 ConstantRange Span =
Chris Lattner6b8b4852010-12-18 20:22:49 +0000398 ConstantRange::makeICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000399
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000400 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
401 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
402 bool hasAdd =
403 match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)));
404 if (hasAdd)
405 Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue());
406
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000407 // If this is an and/!= check then we want to optimize "x ugt 2" into
408 // x != 0 && x != 1.
409 if (!isEQ)
410 Span = Span.inverse();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000411
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000412 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Nick Lewycky219e6bc2012-01-19 18:19:42 +0000413 if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000414 return nullptr;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000415
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000416 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
417 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(V->getContext(), Tmp));
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000418 UsedICmps++;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000419 return hasAdd ? RHSVal : I->getOperand(0);
Chris Lattnerd14b0f12010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000420 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000421 return nullptr;
Chris Lattner9b1af512010-12-13 04:18:32 +0000422 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000423
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000424 // Otherwise, we can only handle an | or &, depending on isEQ.
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000425 if (I->getOpcode() != (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000426 return nullptr;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000427
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000428 unsigned NumValsBeforeLHS = Vals.size();
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000429 unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeLHS = UsedICmps;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000430 if (Value *LHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(0), Vals, Extra, DL,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000431 isEQ, UsedICmps)) {
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000432 unsigned NumVals = Vals.size();
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000433 unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeRHS = UsedICmps;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000434 if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, DL,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000435 isEQ, UsedICmps)) {
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000436 if (LHS == RHS)
437 return LHS;
Chris Lattner79db3572010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000438 Vals.resize(NumVals);
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000439 UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeRHS;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000440 }
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000441
442 // The RHS of the or/and can't be folded in and we haven't used "Extra" yet,
443 // set it and return success.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000444 if (Extra == nullptr || Extra == I->getOperand(1)) {
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000445 Extra = I->getOperand(1);
446 return LHS;
447 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000448
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000449 Vals.resize(NumValsBeforeLHS);
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000450 UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeLHS;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000451 return nullptr;
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000452 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000453
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000454 // If the LHS can't be folded in, but Extra is available and RHS can, try to
455 // use LHS as Extra.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000456 if (Extra == nullptr || Extra == I->getOperand(0)) {
Chris Lattner79db3572010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000457 Value *OldExtra = Extra;
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000458 Extra = I->getOperand(0);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000459 if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, DL,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000460 isEQ, UsedICmps))
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000461 return RHS;
Chris Lattner79db3572010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000462 assert(Vals.size() == NumValsBeforeLHS);
463 Extra = OldExtra;
Chris Lattnera442f242010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000464 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000465
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000466 return nullptr;
Chris Lattner6f4b45a2004-02-24 05:38:11 +0000467}
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000468
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000469static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000470 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000471 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
472 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
473 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
474 if (BI->isConditional())
475 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000476 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
477 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000478 }
479
480 TI->eraseFromParent();
481 if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
482}
483
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000484/// isValueEqualityComparison - Return true if the specified terminator checks
485/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000486Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000487 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000488 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
489 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
490 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000491 if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()),
492 pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128)
493 CV = SI->getCondition();
494 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000495 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000496 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition()))
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000497 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000498 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
499
500 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000501 if (DL && CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000502 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
503 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000504 if (PTII->getType() == DL->getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000505 CV = Ptr;
506 }
507 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000508 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000509}
510
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000511/// GetValueEqualityComparisonCases - Given a value comparison instruction,
512/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000513BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000514GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI,
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000515 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase>
516 &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000517 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000518 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
519 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i)
520 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(),
521 i.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000522 return SI->getDefaultDest();
523 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000524
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000525 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000526 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000527 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
528 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1),
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000529 DL),
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000530 Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000531 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000532}
533
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000534
535/// EliminateBlockCases - Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
536/// in the list that match the specified block.
537static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
538 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000539 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000540}
541
542/// ValuesOverlap - Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as
543/// well.
544static bool
545ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
546 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) {
547 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
548
549 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
550 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
551 std::swap(V1, V2);
552
553 if (V1->size() == 0) return false;
554 if (V1->size() == 1) {
555 // Just scan V2.
556 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
557 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
558 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
559 return true;
560 }
561
562 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
563 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
564 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
565 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
566 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
567 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
568 return true;
569 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
570 ++i1;
571 else
572 ++i2;
573 }
574 return false;
575}
576
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000577/// SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor - If TI is known to be a
578/// terminator instruction and its block is known to only have a single
579/// predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is also a value
580/// comparison with the same value, and if that comparison determines the
581/// outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a very limited
582/// form of jump threading.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000583bool SimplifyCFGOpt::
584SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000585 BasicBlock *Pred,
586 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000587 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
588 if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
589
590 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
591 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
592 if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates.
593
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000594 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
595 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
596
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000597 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000598 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000599 BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(),
600 PredCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000601 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000602
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000603 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000604 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000605 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000606 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000607
608 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
609 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
610 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
611 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
612 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
613 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000614 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000615 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000616
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000617 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
618 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
619 // uncond br.
620 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
621 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000622 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000623 (void) NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000624
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000625 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000626 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000627
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000628 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
629 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000630
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000631 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
632 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000633 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000634
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000635 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
636 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000637 SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases;
638 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
639 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000640
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000641 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000642 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000643
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000644 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
645 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
646 MDNode* MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
647 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
648 if (HasWeight)
649 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
650 ++MD_i) {
651 ConstantInt* CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
652 assert(CI);
653 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
654 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000655 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
656 --i;
657 if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000658 if (HasWeight) {
659 std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
660 Weights.pop_back();
661 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000662 i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
663 SI->removeCase(i);
664 }
665 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000666 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000667 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
668 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
669 createBranchWeights(Weights));
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000670
671 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000672 return true;
673 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000674
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000675 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
676 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000677 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000678 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000679 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
680 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000681 if (TIV)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000682 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
683 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
684 }
685 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000686
687 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
688 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000689 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000690 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
691 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
692 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
693 break;
694 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000695
696 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000697 if (!TheRealDest) TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000698
699 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
700 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000701 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI)
702 if (*SI != CheckEdge)
703 (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000704 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000705 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000706
707 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000708 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000709 (void) NI;
710
711 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
712 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n");
713
714 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
715 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000716}
717
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000718namespace {
719 /// ConstantIntOrdering - This class implements a stable ordering of constant
720 /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
721 /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
722 struct ConstantIntOrdering {
723 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
724 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
725 }
726 };
727}
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000728
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000729static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
730 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
731 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
732 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000733 if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()))
734 return 1;
735 if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue())
736 return 0;
737 return -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000738}
739
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000740static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) {
741 MDNode* ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
742 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
743 if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
744 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
745
746 return false;
747}
748
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000749/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
750/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
751/// metadata.
752static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
753 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
754 MDNode* MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
755 assert(MD);
756 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000757 ConstantInt *CI = cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000758 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000759 }
760
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000761 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
762 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
763 // default weight to be the first entry.
764 if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
765 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
766 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
767 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
768 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000769 }
770}
771
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000772/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000773static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000774 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
775 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
776 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
777 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
778 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000779 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000780}
781
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000782/// FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors - The specified terminator is a value
783/// equality comparison instruction (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
784/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
785/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000786bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
787 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000788 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
789 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
790 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
791 bool Changed = false;
792
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000793 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000794 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000795 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000796
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000797 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
798 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
799 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
800
801 if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) {
802 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000803 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000804 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
805
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000806 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000807 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
808
809 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
810 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
811 // build.
Chris Lattner6b39cb92008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000812 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000813
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000814 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
815 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000816 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
817 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
818
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000819 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000820 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000821 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000822 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
823 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
824 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000825 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
826 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
827 // successor's weights
828 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000829
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000830 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000831 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000832 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000833 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000834 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
835 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
836 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000837 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000838
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000839 if (PredDefault == BB) {
840 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
841 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000842 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
843 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
844 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
845 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
846 else {
847 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
848 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000849
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000850 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
851 // Increase weight for the default case.
852 Weights[0] += Weights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000853 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
854 Weights.pop_back();
855 }
856
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000857 PredCases.pop_back();
858 --i; --e;
859 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000860
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000861 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000862 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
863 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
864 PredDefault = BBDefault;
865 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
866 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000867
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000868 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
869 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000870 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
871 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
872 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
873 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
874 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000875 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
876 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
877 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
878 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
879 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]);
880 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000881 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000882 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000883
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000884 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
885 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
886 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
887 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
888 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
889 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
890 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
891 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000892 } else {
893 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
894 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
895 // activated.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000896 std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000897 std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000898 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
899 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
900 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000901
902 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
903 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1];
904 std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back());
905 Weights.pop_back();
906 }
907
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000908 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
909 PredCases.pop_back();
910 --i; --e;
911 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000912
913 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
914 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000915 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
916 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
917 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000918 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
919 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000920 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
921 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
922 PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of
923 }
924
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000925 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
926 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000927 for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I =
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000928 PTIHandled.begin(),
929 E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000930 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
931 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000932 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000933 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000934 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000935 }
936
937 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
938 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
939 // successors.
940 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSuccessors.size(); i != e; ++i)
941 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessors[i], Pred, BB);
942
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000943 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000944 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000945 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000946 assert(DL && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout");
947 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL->getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000948 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000949 }
950
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000951 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000952 SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault,
953 PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000954 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000955 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
956 NewSI->addCase(PredCases[i].Value, PredCases[i].Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000957
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000958 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
959 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
960 FitWeights(Weights);
961
962 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
963
964 NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
965 MDBuilder(BB->getContext()).
966 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
967 }
968
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000969 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000970
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000971 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
972 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
973 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000974 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000975 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
976 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000977 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000978 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000979 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000980 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
981 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +0000982 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000983 }
984 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
985 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000986
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000987 Changed = true;
988 }
989 }
990 return Changed;
991}
992
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000993// isSafeToHoistInvoke - If we would need to insert a select that uses the
994// value of this invoke (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we
995// would need to do this), we can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere
996// to put the select in this case.
997static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
998 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +0000999 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001000 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001001 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001002 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1003 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1004 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1005 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) {
1006 return false;
1007 }
1008 }
1009 }
1010 return true;
1011}
1012
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001013static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1014
Chris Lattnerd683bdd2005-08-03 17:59:45 +00001015/// HoistThenElseCodeToIf - Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001016/// BB2, hoist any common code in the two blocks up into the branch block. The
1017/// caller of this function guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001018static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001019 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1020 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1021 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1022 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1023 // identical order.
1024 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1025 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
1026
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001027 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1028 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1029
1030 Instruction *I1 = BB1_Itr++, *I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001031 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1032 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1033 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1034 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1035 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1036 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1037 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1038 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1039 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001040 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001041 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001042 return false;
1043
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001044 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001045
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001046 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001047 do {
1048 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1049 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
1050 if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1))
1051 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001052
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001053 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1054 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1055 // the now redundant second instruction.
1056 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1057 if (!I2->use_empty())
1058 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
Dan Gohmanc8a27f22009-08-25 22:11:20 +00001059 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
Rafael Espindolaea46c322014-08-15 15:46:38 +00001060 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {
1061 LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1062 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1063 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1064 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load
1065 };
1066 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001067 I2->eraseFromParent();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001068 Changed = true;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001069
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001070 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001071 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
Devang Patel197c3522011-04-07 17:27:36 +00001072 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1073 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1074 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1075 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1076 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1077 I1 = BB1_Itr++;
1078 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1079 I2 = BB2_Itr++;
1080 }
Devang Patele48ddf82011-04-07 00:30:15 +00001081 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001082
1083 return true;
1084
1085HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001086 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1087 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001088 return Changed;
1089
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001090 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001091 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001092 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001093 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
1094 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1095 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
1096 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1097 continue;
1098
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001099 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1100 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
1101 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, PN) ||
1102 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, PN))
1103 return Changed;
1104
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001105 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V, DL))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001106 return Changed;
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001107 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V, DL))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001108 return Changed;
1109 }
1110 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001111
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001112 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001113 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001114 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI, NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001115 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001116 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1117 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001118 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001119 }
1120
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001121 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001122 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1123 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1124 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1125 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
1126 std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001127 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001128 PHINode *PN;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001129 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin();
Chris Lattner01944572004-11-30 07:47:34 +00001130 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001131 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1132 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001133 if (BB1V == BB2V) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001134
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001135 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1136 // that determines the right value.
1137 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001138 if (!SI)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001139 SI = cast<SelectInst>
1140 (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1141 BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName()));
1142
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001143 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
1144 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1145 if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1146 PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001147 }
1148 }
1149
1150 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00001151 for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI)
1152 AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001153
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001154 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001155 return true;
1156}
1157
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001158/// SinkThenElseCodeToEnd - Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd,
1159/// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor
1160/// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code
1161/// in the two predecessors to BBEnd.
1162static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) {
1163 assert(BI1->isUnconditional());
1164 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent();
1165 BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0);
1166
1167 // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with
1168 // an unconditional branch.
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001169 pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd);
1170 BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++;
1171 if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor.
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001172 return false;
Benjamin Kramerf064b652012-09-30 21:03:56 +00001173 BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++;
1174 if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors.
1175 return false;
1176 BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001177 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator());
1178 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional())
1179 return false;
1180
1181 // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd.
1182 std::map<Value*, std::pair<Value*, PHINode*> > MapValueFromBB1ToBB2;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001183 Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = nullptr;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001184 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end();
1185 I != E; ++I) {
1186 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) {
1187 Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001188 Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001189 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[BB1V] = std::make_pair(BB2V, PN);
1190 } else {
1191 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I;
1192 break;
1193 }
1194 }
1195 if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd)
1196 return false;
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001197
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001198
1199 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1200 // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical
1201 // instructions in an identical order.
1202 BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(),
1203 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(), RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(),
1204 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
1205 // Skip debug info.
1206 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1207 if (RI1 == RE1)
1208 return false;
1209 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1210 if (RI2 == RE2)
1211 return false;
1212 // Skip the unconditional branches.
1213 ++RI1;
1214 ++RI2;
1215
1216 bool Changed = false;
1217 while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) {
1218 // Skip debug info.
1219 while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1;
1220 if (RI1 == RE1)
1221 return Changed;
1222 while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2;
1223 if (RI2 == RE2)
1224 return Changed;
1225
1226 Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2;
1227 // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they
1228 // perform the same operation.
1229 // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc.
1230 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) ||
1231 isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) ||
1232 isa<LandingPadInst>(I1) || isa<LandingPadInst>(I2) ||
1233 isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) ||
1234 I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() ||
1235 I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() ||
1236 !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() ||
1237 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1) == MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() ||
1238 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].first != I2)
1239 return Changed;
1240
1241 // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst.
1242 ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2);
1243 bool SwapOpnds = false;
1244 if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 &&
1245 ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) &&
1246 ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) &&
1247 (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) ||
1248 ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) {
1249 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1250 SwapOpnds = true;
1251 }
1252 if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) {
1253 if (SwapOpnds)
1254 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1255 return Changed;
1256 }
1257
1258 // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated
1259 // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is
1260 // a single pair of different operands.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001261 Value *DifferentOp1 = nullptr, *DifferentOp2 = nullptr;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001262 unsigned Op1Idx = 0;
1263 for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) {
1264 if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I))
1265 continue;
1266 // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or
1267 // the different operand is already in MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.
1268 // Early exit if we need a PHI node to replace a constant.
1269 if (DifferentOp1 ||
1270 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1->getOperand(I)) !=
1271 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() ||
1272 isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) ||
1273 isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) {
1274 // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping.
1275 if (SwapOpnds)
1276 ICmp2->swapOperands();
1277 return Changed;
1278 }
1279 DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I);
1280 Op1Idx = I;
1281 DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I);
1282 }
1283
1284 // We insert the pair of different operands to MapValueFromBB1ToBB2 and
1285 // remove (I1, I2) from MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.
1286 if (DifferentOp1) {
1287 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2,
1288 DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink",
1289 BBEnd->begin());
1290 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[DifferentOp1] = std::make_pair(DifferentOp2, NewPN);
1291 // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1.
1292 I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN);
1293 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1);
1294 NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2);
1295 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";);
1296 }
1297 PHINode *OldPN = MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].second;
1298 MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.erase(I1);
1299
1300 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n";);
1301 DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n";);
1302 // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first
1303 // instruction in the basic block down.
1304 bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin());
1305 // Sink the instruction.
1306 BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd, BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1307 if (!OldPN->use_empty())
1308 OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1309 OldPN->eraseFromParent();
1310
1311 if (!I2->use_empty())
1312 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1313 I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2);
1314 I2->eraseFromParent();
1315
1316 if (UpdateRE1)
1317 RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend();
1318 if (UpdateRE2)
1319 RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend();
1320 FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = I1;
1321 NumSinkCommons++;
1322 Changed = true;
1323 }
1324 return Changed;
1325}
1326
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001327/// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
1328/// conditional block.
1329///
1330/// We are looking for code like the following:
1331/// BrBB:
1332/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1333/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1334/// ... // function).
1335/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1336/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1337/// ThenBB:
1338/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1339/// br label EndBB
1340/// EndBB:
1341/// ...
1342/// We are going to transform this into:
1343/// BrBB:
1344/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1345/// ... //
1346/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1347/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1348/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1349/// ...
1350///
1351/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1352/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001353static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1354 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001355 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1356 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001357 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001358
1359 // Volatile or atomic.
1360 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001361 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001362
1363 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1364
1365 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
1366 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10;
1367 for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(),
1368 RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) {
1369 Instruction *CurI = &*RI;
1370
1371 // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free().
1372 if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001373 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001374
1375 StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI);
1376 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1377 if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1378 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1379 return SI->getValueOperand();
1380 else if (SI)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001381 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001382 }
1383
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001384 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001385}
1386
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001387/// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001388///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001389/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1390/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1391/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1392/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1393/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1394///
1395/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1396/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1397/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1398/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1399///
1400///
1401/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1402/// \code
1403/// BB:
1404/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1405/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1406/// ThenBB:
1407/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001408/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001409/// EndBB:
1410/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1411/// ...
1412/// \endcode
1413///
1414/// Into this IR:
1415/// \code
1416/// BB:
1417/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1418/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1419/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1420/// ...
1421/// \endcode
1422///
1423/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001424static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
1425 const DataLayout *DL) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001426 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1427 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1428 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1429 return false;
1430
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001431 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1432 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1433
1434 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1435 // to swap the select operands later.
1436 bool Invert = false;
1437 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1438 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1439 Invert = true;
1440 }
1441 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1442
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001443 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1444 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1445 // - They are defined in BB, and
1446 // - They have no side effects, and
1447 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1448 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1449
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001450 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001451 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1452 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001453 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001454 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001455 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
1456 Instruction *I = BBI;
1457 // Skip debug info.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001458 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1459 continue;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001460
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001461 // Only speculatively execution a single instruction (not counting the
1462 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001463 ++SpeculationCost;
1464 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001465 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001466
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001467 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001468 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL) &&
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001469 !(HoistCondStores &&
1470 (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(I, BB, ThenBB,
1471 EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001472 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001473 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001474 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, DL) > PHINodeFoldingThreshold)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001475 return false;
1476
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001477 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1478 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1479 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1480
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001481 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001482 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001483 // being sunk into the use block.
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001484 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001485 i != e; ++i) {
1486 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001487 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB ||
1488 OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
1489 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1490
1491 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001492 }
1493 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001494
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001495 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1496 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1497 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
1498 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I =
1499 SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
1500 I != E; ++I)
1501 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001502 ++SpeculationCost;
1503 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001504 return false;
1505 }
1506
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001507 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
1508 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001509 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001510 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001511 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
1512 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001513
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001514 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001515 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001516 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001517 continue;
1518
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001519 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
1520 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, PN) ||
1521 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, PN))
1522 return false;
1523
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001524 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001525 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
1526 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
1527 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001528 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
1529
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001530 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE, DL)) ||
1531 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE, DL)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001532 return false;
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001533 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, DL) : 0;
1534 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, DL) : 0;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00001535 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00001536 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001537
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00001538 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
1539 // getting expanded into Instructions.
1540 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001541 // constant expression.
1542 ++SpeculationCost;
1543 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001544 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001545 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001546
1547 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
1548 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001549 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001550 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001551
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001552 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001553 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001554
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001555 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
1556 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
1557 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
1558 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
1559 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
1560 if (Invert)
1561 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1562 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() +
1563 "." + FalseV->getName());
1564 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
1565 }
1566
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001567 // Hoist the instructions.
1568 BB->getInstList().splice(BI, ThenBB->getInstList(), ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001569 std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001570
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001571 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001572 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001573 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin();
1574 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) {
1575 unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
1576 unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
1577 Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI);
1578 Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI);
1579
1580 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
1581 if (OrigV == ThenV)
1582 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001583
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001584 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001585 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
1586 // destinations were inverted.
1587 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001588 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00001589 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
1590 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV,
1591 TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName());
1592 PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
1593 PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001594 }
1595
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00001596 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001597 return true;
1598}
1599
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001600/// \returns True if this block contains a CallInst with the NoDuplicate
1601/// attribute.
1602static bool HasNoDuplicateCall(const BasicBlock *BB) {
1603 for (BasicBlock::const_iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) {
1604 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I);
1605 if (!CI)
1606 continue;
1607 if (CI->cannotDuplicate())
1608 return true;
1609 }
1610 return false;
1611}
1612
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001613/// BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough - Return true if we can thread a branch
1614/// across this block.
1615static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
1616 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001617 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001618
Devang Patel84fceff2009-03-10 18:00:05 +00001619 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001620 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
1621 continue;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001622 if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001623 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001624
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00001625 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001626 // live outside of the current basic block.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00001627 for (User *U : BBI->users()) {
1628 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
1629 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI)) return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001630 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001631
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001632 // Looks ok, continue checking.
1633 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00001634
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001635 return true;
1636}
1637
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001638/// FoldCondBranchOnPHI - If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value
1639/// that is defined in the same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are
1640/// constants, thread edges corresponding to that entry to be branches to their
1641/// ultimate destination.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001642static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001643 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1644 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00001645 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
1646 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001647 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
1648 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001649
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001650 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
1651 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00001652 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001653 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001654 }
1655
1656 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00001657 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001658
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00001659 if (HasNoDuplicateCall(BB)) return false;
1660
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001661 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
1662 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001663 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001664 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001665 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001666
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001667 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
1668 // branch to RealDest.
1669 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
1670 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001671
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001672 if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001673 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
1674 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001675
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001676 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
1677 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
1678 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
1679 // the edge we are about to create.
1680 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
1681 RealDest->getName()+".critedge",
1682 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
1683 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001684
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00001685 // Update PHI nodes.
1686 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001687
1688 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
1689 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
1690 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
1691 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
1692 DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
1693 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
1694 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
1695 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
1696 continue;
1697 }
1698 // Clone the instruction.
1699 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
1700 if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001701
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001702 // Update operands due to translation.
1703 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end();
1704 i != e; ++i) {
1705 DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
1706 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
1707 *i = PI->second;
1708 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001709
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001710 // Check for trivial simplification.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001711 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001712 TranslateMap[BBI] = V;
1713 delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001714 } else {
1715 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
1716 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
1717 if (!BBI->use_empty())
1718 TranslateMap[BBI] = N;
1719 }
1720 }
1721
1722 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
1723 // to EdgeBB instead.
1724 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
1725 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1726 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
1727 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
1728 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
1729 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00001730
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001731 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001732 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL) | true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00001733 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001734
1735 return false;
1736}
1737
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001738/// FoldTwoEntryPHINode - Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry
1739/// PHI node, see if we can eliminate it.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001740static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const DataLayout *DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001741 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
1742 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
1743 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
1744 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
1745 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
1746 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001747 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
1748 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
1749 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001750 if (!IfCond ||
1751 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
1752 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
1753 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001754
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00001755 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
1756 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
1757 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
1758 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
1759 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
1760 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
1761 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
1762 if (NumPhis > 2)
1763 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001764
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001765 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
1766 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
1767 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001768 SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00001769 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
1770 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001771
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001772 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
1773 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00001774 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001775 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001776 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001777 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001778 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001779
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001780 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001781 MaxCostVal0, DL) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00001782 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001783 MaxCostVal1, DL))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00001784 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001785 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001786
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00001787 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001788 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
1789 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001790 if (!PN) return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001791
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001792 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
1793 // often be turned into switches and other things.
1794 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
1795 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
1796 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
1797 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
1798 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001799
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001800 // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all
1801 // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If
1802 // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not
1803 // worth promoting to select instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001804 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001805 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
1806 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
1807 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001808 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001809 } else {
1810 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
1811 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001812 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001813 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1814 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1815 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1816 return false;
1817 }
1818 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001819
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001820 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001821 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001822 } else {
1823 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
1824 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I)
Devang Patel2032cad2009-02-03 22:12:02 +00001825 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001826 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
1827 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control
1828 // flow, so the xform is not worth it.
1829 return false;
1830 }
1831 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001832
Chris Lattner9fd838d2010-12-14 07:23:10 +00001833 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: "
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00001834 << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001835
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001836 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
1837 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001838 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001839 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001840
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001841 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
1842 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001843 if (IfBlock1)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001844 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001845 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001846 IfBlock1->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001847 if (IfBlock2)
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00001848 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt,
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001849 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001850 IfBlock2->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001851
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001852 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
1853 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001854 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
1855 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001856
1857 SelectInst *NV =
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001858 cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, ""));
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001859 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV);
1860 NV->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00001861 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001862 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001863
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001864 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
1865 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
1866 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
1867 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00001868 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
1869 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00001870 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00001871 return true;
1872}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00001873
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001874/// SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns - If we found a conditional branch that goes
1875/// to two returning blocks, try to merge them together into one return,
1876/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001877static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001878 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001879 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
1880 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
1881 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
1882 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
1883 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001884
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001885 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
1886 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
1887 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001888 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001889 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001890 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00001891 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001892
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001893 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001894 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
1895 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
1896 // branch into a return.
1897 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
1898 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1899 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001900 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001901 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001902 return true;
1903 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001904
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001905 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
1906 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
1907 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
1908 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001909
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001910 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
1911 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
1912 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
1913 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
1914 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
1915 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
1916 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001917
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001918 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
1919 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
1920 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
1921 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
1922 // safe.
1923 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
1924 if (TCV->canTrap())
1925 return false;
1926 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
1927 if (FCV->canTrap())
1928 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001929
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001930 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
1931 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
1932 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
1933 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001934
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001935 // Insert select instructions where needed.
1936 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001937 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001938 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00001939 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
1940 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
1941 TrueValue = FalseValue;
1942 } else {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001943 TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue,
1944 FalseValue, "retval");
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001945 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001946 }
1947
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001948 Value *RI = !TrueValue ?
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00001949 Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
1950
Daniel Dunbar5e0a58b2009-08-23 10:29:55 +00001951 (void) RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001952
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00001953 DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00001954 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI
1955 << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001956
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001957 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
1958
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00001959 return true;
1960}
1961
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001962/// ExtractBranchMetadata - Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the
1963/// probabilities of the branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt
1964/// parameters and return true, or returns false if no or invalid metadata was
1965/// found.
1966static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI,
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00001967 uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) {
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001968 assert(BI->isConditional() &&
1969 "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?");
1970 MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Nick Lewycky398255e2011-12-27 18:27:22 +00001971 if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false;
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001972 ConstantInt *CITrue = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1));
1973 ConstantInt *CIFalse = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2));
Nick Lewycky398255e2011-12-27 18:27:22 +00001974 if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false;
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00001975 ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue();
1976 ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue();
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00001977 return true;
1978}
1979
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001980/// checkCSEInPredecessor - Return true if the given instruction is available
1981/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
1982///
Benjamin Kramerabbfe692012-07-13 13:25:15 +00001983static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00001984 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
1985 return false;
1986 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) {
1987 Instruction *PBI = &*I;
1988 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
1989 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
1990 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
1991 Inst->eraseFromParent();
1992 return true;
1993 }
1994 }
1995 return false;
1996}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00001997
Chris Lattner7d4cdae2011-04-11 23:24:57 +00001998/// FoldBranchToCommonDest - If this basic block is simple enough, and if a
1999/// predecessor branches to us and one of our successors, fold the block into
2000/// the predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002001bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL,
2002 unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002003 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002004
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002005 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002006 if (BI->isConditional())
2007 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2008 else {
2009 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2010 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
2011 // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its
2012 // predecessor.
2013 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2014 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2015 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2016 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2017 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
2018 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end();
2019 I != E; ) {
2020 Instruction *Curr = I++;
2021 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2022 Cond = Curr;
2023 break;
2024 }
2025 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
2026 if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB))
2027 return false;
2028 }
2029 }
2030
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002031 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002032 return false;
2033 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002034
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002035 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2036 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002037 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002038
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002039 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
2040 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = Cond; ++CondIt;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002041
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002042 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002043 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002044
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002045 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002046 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002047
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002048 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2049 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2050 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2051 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
2052 // number of the bonus instructions does not exceed a certain threshold.
2053 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
2054 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != I; ++I) {
2055 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2056 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2057 continue;
2058 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I, DL))
2059 return false;
2060 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2061 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2062 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2063 return false;
2064 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2065 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2066 // and Cond.
2067 ++NumBonusInsts;
2068 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2069 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2070 return false;
2071 }
2072
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002073 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2074 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2075 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2076 if (CE->canTrap())
2077 return false;
2078 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2079 if (CE->canTrap())
2080 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002081
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002082 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
2083 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002084 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002085 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2086 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002087
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002088 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2089 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002090 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002091
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002092 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2093 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2094 // blocks.
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002095 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002096 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002097 (BI->isConditional() &&
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002098 !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
2099 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2100 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002101 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002102
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002103 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002104 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002105 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002106
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002107 if (BI->isConditional()) {
2108 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest)
2109 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2110 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest)
2111 Opc = Instruction::And;
2112 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest)
2113 Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true;
2114 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest)
2115 Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true;
2116 else
2117 continue;
2118 } else {
2119 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2120 continue;
2121 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002122
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002123 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002124 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002125
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002126 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2127 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002128 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002129
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002130 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2131 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2132 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2133 } else {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002134 NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond,
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002135 PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002136 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002137
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002138 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002139 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002140 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002141
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002142 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
2143 // Note that there may be mutliple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
2144 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2145 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2146 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
2147 // every instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
2148 // instructions.
2149 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
2150 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2151 continue;
2152 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2153 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
2154 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
2155 VMap[BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002156
2157 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2158 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2159 // only given the branch precondition.
2160 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2161 // semantics we don't understand.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002162 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_dbg);
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002163
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002164 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, NewBonusInst);
2165 NewBonusInst->takeName(BonusInst);
2166 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002167 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002168
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002169 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2170 // two conditions together.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00002171 Instruction *New = Cond->clone();
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002172 RemapInstruction(New, VMap,
2173 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingEntries);
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002174 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, New);
2175 New->takeName(Cond);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002176 Cond->setName(New->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002177
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002178 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002179 Instruction *NewCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002180 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(),
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002181 New, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002182 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2183
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002184 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
2185 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2186 PredFalseWeight);
2187 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2188 SuccFalseWeight);
2189 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2190
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002191 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002192 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2193 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2194 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2195 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2196 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2197 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2198 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2199 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2200 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
2201 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2202 SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2203 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002204 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2205 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2206 }
2207 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002208 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2209 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2210 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
2211 //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
2212 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
2213 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight +
2214 SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2215 //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2216 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2217 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002218 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2219 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2220 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002221 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2222 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2223 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2224
2225 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2226 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2227 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2228 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2229 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002230 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002231 } else {
2232 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2233 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002234 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002235 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
2236 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002237 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002238 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2239 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2240 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2241 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
2242 Instruction *NotCond =
2243 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2244 "not.cond"));
2245 MergedCond =
2246 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2247 NotCond, New,
2248 "and.cond"));
2249 if (PBI_C->isOne())
2250 MergedCond =
2251 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2252 PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond,
2253 "or.cond"));
2254 } else {
2255 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2256 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2257 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002258 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002259 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And,
2260 PBI->getCondition(), New,
2261 "and.cond"));
2262 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
2263 Instruction *NotCond =
2264 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(),
2265 "not.cond"));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002266 MergedCond =
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002267 cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or,
2268 NotCond, MergedCond,
2269 "or.cond"));
2270 }
2271 }
2272 // Update PHI Node.
2273 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2274 MergedCond);
2275 }
2276 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2277 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2278 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2279 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002280 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002281
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002282 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2283 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
2284
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002285 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2286 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I)
2287 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I))
2288 I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002289
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002290 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002291 }
2292 return false;
2293}
2294
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002295/// SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch - If we have a conditional branch as a
2296/// predecessor of another block, this function tries to simplify it. We know
2297/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
2298/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
2299static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI) {
2300 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
2301 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00002302
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002303 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002304 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002305 // this conditional branch redundant.
2306 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2307 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2308 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
2309 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
2310 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
2311 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
2312 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002313 BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002314 CondIsTrue));
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002315 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
2316 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002317
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002318 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
2319 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
2320 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
2321 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002322 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002323 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Jay Foad52131342011-03-30 11:28:46 +00002324 std::distance(PB, PE),
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002325 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr",
2326 BB->begin());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00002327 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
2328 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
2329 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00002330 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002331 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
2332 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002333 PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() &&
2334 PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
2335 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
2336 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002337 NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()),
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002338 CondIsTrue), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002339 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002340 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002341 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00002342 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002343
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002344 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002345 return true;
2346 }
2347 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002348
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002349 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002350 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002351 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00002352 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
2353 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2354 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
2355 ++BBI;
2356 if (&*BBI != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002357 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002358
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002359
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00002360 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
2361 if (CE->canTrap())
2362 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002363
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002364 int PBIOp, BIOp;
2365 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2366 PBIOp = BIOp = 0;
2367 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2368 PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1;
2369 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
2370 PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0;
2371 else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
2372 PBIOp = BIOp = 1;
2373 else
2374 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002375
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002376 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
2377 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
2378 // keep getting unwound.
2379 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
2380 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002381
2382 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002383 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
2384 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002385
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002386 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
2387 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
2388 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
2389
2390 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002391 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2392 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002393 isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002394 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
2395 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002396
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002397 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
2398 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2399 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
2400 if (CE->canTrap())
2401 return false;
2402
2403 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2404 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2405 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
2406 if (CE->canTrap())
2407 return false;
2408 }
2409
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002410 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00002411 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002412
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002413 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
Chris Lattnerb25de3f2009-08-23 04:37:46 +00002414 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002415
2416
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002417 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
2418 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
2419 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
2420 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
2421 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
2422 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
2423 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
2424 if (OtherDest == BB) {
2425 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
2426 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Owen Anderson55f1c092009-08-13 21:58:54 +00002427 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(),
2428 "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002429 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
2430 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002431 }
2432
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002433 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002434
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002435 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
2436 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002437
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002438 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
2439 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002440 IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002441 if (PBIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002442 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not");
2443
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002444 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
2445 if (BIOp)
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002446 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not");
2447
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002448 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002449 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002450
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002451 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
2452 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
2453 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
2454 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002455
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00002456 // Update branch weight for PBI.
2457 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
2458 bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight,
2459 PredFalseWeight);
2460 bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight,
2461 SuccFalseWeight);
2462 if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) {
2463 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
2464 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
2465 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
2466 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
2467 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
2468 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
2469 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
2470 SmallVector<uint64_t, 2> NewWeights;
2471 NewWeights.push_back(PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
2472 PredOther * SuccCommon);
2473 NewWeights.push_back(PredOther * SuccOther);
2474 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2475 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2476
2477 SmallVector<uint32_t, 2> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end());
2478 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2479 MDBuilder(BI->getContext()).
2480 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2481 }
2482
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002483 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
2484 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002485 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002486
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002487 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
2488 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
2489 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
2490 // them agree.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002491 PHINode *PN;
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002492 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin();
2493 (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) {
2494 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2495 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
2496 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
2497 if (BIV != PBIV) {
2498 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002499 Value *NV = cast<SelectInst>
2500 (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux"));
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002501 PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002502 }
2503 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002504
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00002505 DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
2506 DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002507
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00002508 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
2509 // one fewer predecessor.
2510 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00002511}
2512
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002513// SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect - Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a
2514// branch to TrueBB if Cond is true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
2515// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
2516// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
2517// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
2518static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002519 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
2520 uint32_t TrueWeight,
2521 uint32_t FalseWeight){
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002522 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
2523 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
2524 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
2525 // successor.
2526 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002527 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002528
2529 // Then remove the rest.
2530 for (unsigned I = 0, E = OldTerm->getNumSuccessors(); I != E; ++I) {
2531 BasicBlock *Succ = OldTerm->getSuccessor(I);
2532 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
2533 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002534 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002535 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002536 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002537 else
2538 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent());
2539 }
2540
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002541 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
2542 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
2543
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002544 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002545 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002546 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
2547 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
2548 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002549 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002550 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002551 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
2552 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002553 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
2554 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
2555 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2556 MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()).
2557 createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight));
2558 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002559 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
2560 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
2561 // terminator must be unreachable.
2562 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
2563 } else {
2564 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
2565 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
2566 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002567 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002568 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002569 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002570 else
2571 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00002572 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002573 }
2574
2575 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
2576 return true;
2577}
2578
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002579// SimplifySwitchOnSelect - Replaces
2580// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
2581// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
2582// unconditional otherwise.
2583static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
2584 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
2585 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
2586 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
2587 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
2588 return false;
2589
2590 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
2591 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00002592 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor();
2593 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002594
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002595 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
2596 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
2597 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2598 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2599 if (HasWeights) {
2600 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2601 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2602 TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).
2603 getSuccessorIndex()];
2604 FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).
2605 getSuccessorIndex()];
2606 }
2607 }
2608
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002609 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002610 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB,
2611 TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00002612}
2613
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002614// SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect - Replaces
2615// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
2616// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
2617// with
2618// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
2619static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
2620 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
2621 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
2622 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
2623 if (!TBA || !FBA)
2624 return false;
2625
2626 // Extract the actual blocks.
2627 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
2628 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
2629
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00002630 // Perform the actual simplification.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00002631 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB,
2632 0, 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00002633}
2634
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002635/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt - This is called when we find an icmp
2636/// instruction (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
2637/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
2638/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
2639/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
2640/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
2641/// like:
2642///
2643/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
2644/// DEFAULT:
2645/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
2646/// br label %end
2647/// end:
2648/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002649///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002650/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
2651/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00002652static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
2653 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002654 unsigned BonusInstThreshold, const DataLayout *DL, AssumptionTracker *AT) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002655 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002656
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002657 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
2658 // complex.
2659 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false;
2660
2661 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
2662 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002663
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002664 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
2665 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
2666 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
2667 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002668 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002669
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002670 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
2671 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
2672 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002673
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002674 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
2675 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
2676 // away.
2677 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
2678 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
2679 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
2680 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002681
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002682 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, DL)) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002683 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002684 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2685 }
2686 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002687 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002688 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002689
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002690 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
2691 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
2692 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00002693 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002694 Value *V;
2695 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2696 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2697 else
2698 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002699
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002700 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
2701 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2702 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002703 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00002704 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002705
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002706 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
2707 // the block.
2708 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002709 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002710 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002711 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
2712 return false;
2713
2714 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
2715 // true in the PHI.
2716 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
2717 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
2718
2719 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
2720 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
2721
2722 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
2723 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
2724 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
2725 ICI->eraseFromParent();
2726
2727 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
2728 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
2729 BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge",
2730 BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00002731 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
2732 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
2733 if (HasWeights) {
2734 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
2735 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
2736 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
2737 Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1;
2738 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
2739
2740 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
2741 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
2742 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
2743 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
2744 }
2745 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002746 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002747
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002748 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00002749 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
2750 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
2751 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00002752 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
2753 return true;
2754}
2755
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002756/// SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain - The specified branch is a conditional branch.
2757/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
2758/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002759static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *DL,
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002760 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002761 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002762 if (!Cond) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002763
2764
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002765 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
2766 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
2767 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002768 Value *CompVal = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002769 std::vector<ConstantInt*> Values;
2770 bool TrueWhenEqual = true;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002771 Value *ExtraCase = nullptr;
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002772 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002773
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002774 if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002775 CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, DL, true,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002776 UsedICmps);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002777 } else if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002778 CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, DL, false,
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002779 UsedICmps);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002780 TrueWhenEqual = false;
2781 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002782
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002783 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002784 if (!CompVal) return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002785
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00002786 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
2787 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
2788 return false;
2789
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002790 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
2791 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
2792 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
2793 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002794
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002795 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
2796 // transformation. A switch with one value is just an cond branch.
2797 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002798
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00002799 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
2800 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
2801
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002802 // Figure out which block is which destination.
2803 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2804 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2805 if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002806
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002807 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002808
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002809 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002810 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002811
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002812 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
2813 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
2814 // right before the condbr to handle it.
2815 if (ExtraCase) {
2816 BasicBlock *NewBB = BB->splitBasicBlock(BI, "switch.early.test");
2817 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
2818 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002819 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2820
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002821 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002822 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002823 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002824 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002825
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002826 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002827
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00002828 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
2829 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002830 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002831
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002832 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
2833 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002834 BB = NewBB;
2835 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002836
2837 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002838 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
2839 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002840 assert(DL && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout");
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002841 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CompVal,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00002842 DL->getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()),
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002843 "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002844 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002845
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002846 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00002847 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00002848
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002849 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
2850 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
2851 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002852
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002853 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
2854 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
2855 // the number of edges added.
2856 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin();
2857 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
2858 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
2859 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2860 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i)
2861 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
2862 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002863
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002864 // Erase the old branch instruction.
2865 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002866
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002867 DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00002868 return true;
2869}
2870
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002871bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
2872 // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught
2873 // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls.
2874 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2875 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
2876 if (RI->getValue() != LPInst)
2877 // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that
2878 // caused control to branch here.
2879 return false;
2880
2881 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
2882 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst, E = RI;
2883 while (++I != E)
2884 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2885 return false;
2886
2887 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002888 bool InvokeRequiresTableEntry = false;
2889 bool Changed = false;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002890 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
2891 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>((*PI++)->getTerminator());
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002892
2893 if (II->hasFnAttr(Attribute::UWTable)) {
2894 // Don't remove an `invoke' instruction if the ABI requires an entry into
2895 // the table.
2896 InvokeRequiresTableEntry = true;
2897 continue;
2898 }
2899
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002900 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end() - 3);
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002901
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002902 // Insert a call instruction before the invoke.
2903 CallInst *Call = CallInst::Create(II->getCalledValue(), Args, "", II);
2904 Call->takeName(II);
2905 Call->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
2906 Call->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
2907 Call->setDebugLoc(II->getDebugLoc());
2908
2909 // Anything that used the value produced by the invoke instruction now uses
2910 // the value produced by the call instruction. Note that we do this even
2911 // for void functions and calls with no uses so that the callgraph edge is
2912 // updated.
2913 II->replaceAllUsesWith(Call);
2914 BB->removePredecessor(II->getParent());
2915
2916 // Insert a branch to the normal destination right before the invoke.
2917 BranchInst::Create(II->getNormalDest(), II);
2918
2919 // Finally, delete the invoke instruction!
2920 II->eraseFromParent();
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002921 Changed = true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002922 }
2923
Bill Wendling9534d882013-03-11 20:53:00 +00002924 if (!InvokeRequiresTableEntry)
2925 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
2926 BB->eraseFromParent();
2927
2928 return Changed;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00002929}
2930
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002931bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002932 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
2933 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002934
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002935 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
2936 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
2937 SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002938 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2939 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002940 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
2941 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
2942 if (BI->isUnconditional())
2943 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
2944 else
2945 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
2946 }
2947 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002948
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002949 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002950 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002951 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
2952 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
2953 DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
2954 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00002955 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002956 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002957
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002958 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
2959 if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB))
2960 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
2961 BB->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002962
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002963 return true;
2964 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002965
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002966 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
2967 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
2968 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
2969 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
2970 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002971
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002972 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
2973 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
2974 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002975 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002976 return true;
2977 }
2978 return false;
2979}
2980
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002981bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
2982 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002983
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002984 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002985
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002986 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
2987 // be removed, do so.
2988 while (UI != BB->begin()) {
2989 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI;
2990 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00002991 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
2992 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
2993 // operations may have this effect.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00002994 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00002995
2996 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
2997 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
2998 if (SI->isVolatile())
2999 break;
3000 } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
3001 if (LI->isVolatile())
3002 break;
3003 } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
3004 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
3005 break;
3006 } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
3007 if (CXI->isVolatile())
3008 break;
3009 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
3010 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003011 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003012 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00003013 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
3014 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
3015 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
3016 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00003017 }
3018
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00003019 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
3020 if (!BBI->use_empty())
3021 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003022 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003023 Changed = true;
3024 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003025
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003026 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
3027 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
3028 if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003029
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003030 SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
3031 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
3032 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003033 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003034 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
3035 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
3036 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
3037 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
3038 TI->eraseFromParent();
3039 Changed = true;
3040 }
3041 } else {
3042 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003043 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003044 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3045 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003046 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003047 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
3048 Changed = true;
3049 }
3050 }
3051 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003052 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003053 i != e; ++i)
3054 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003055 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
3056 SI->removeCase(i);
3057 --i; --e;
3058 Changed = true;
3059 }
3060 // If the default value is unreachable, figure out the most popular
3061 // destination and make it the default.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003062 if (SI->getDefaultDest() == BB) {
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003063 std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> > Popularity;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003064 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003065 i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00003066 std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> &entry =
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003067 Popularity[i.getCaseSuccessor()];
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003068 if (entry.first == 0) {
3069 entry.first = 1;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003070 entry.second = i.getCaseIndex();
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003071 } else {
3072 entry.first++;
3073 }
3074 }
3075
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003076 // Find the most popular block.
3077 unsigned MaxPop = 0;
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003078 unsigned MaxIndex = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003079 BasicBlock *MaxBlock = nullptr;
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003080 for (std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> >::iterator
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003081 I = Popularity.begin(), E = Popularity.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003082 if (I->second.first > MaxPop ||
Eli Friedmanc4414c62011-03-15 02:23:35 +00003083 (I->second.first == MaxPop && MaxIndex > I->second.second)) {
3084 MaxPop = I->second.first;
3085 MaxIndex = I->second.second;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003086 MaxBlock = I->first;
3087 }
3088 }
3089 if (MaxBlock) {
3090 // Make this the new default, allowing us to delete any explicit
3091 // edges to it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003092 SI->setDefaultDest(MaxBlock);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003093 Changed = true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003094
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003095 // If MaxBlock has phinodes in it, remove MaxPop-1 entries from
3096 // it.
3097 if (isa<PHINode>(MaxBlock->begin()))
3098 for (unsigned i = 0; i != MaxPop-1; ++i)
3099 MaxBlock->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003100
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003101 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003102 i != e; ++i)
3103 if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == MaxBlock) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003104 SI->removeCase(i);
3105 --i; --e;
3106 }
3107 }
3108 }
3109 } else if (InvokeInst *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
3110 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
3111 // Convert the invoke to a call instruction. This would be a good
3112 // place to note that the call does not throw though.
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003113 BranchInst *BI = Builder.CreateBr(II->getNormalDest());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003114 II->removeFromParent(); // Take out of symbol table
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003115
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003116 // Insert the call now...
3117 SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end()-3);
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00003118 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
3119 CallInst *CI = Builder.CreateCall(II->getCalledValue(),
Jay Foad5bd375a2011-07-15 08:37:34 +00003120 Args, II->getName());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003121 CI->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv());
3122 CI->setAttributes(II->getAttributes());
3123 // If the invoke produced a value, the call does now instead.
3124 II->replaceAllUsesWith(CI);
3125 delete II;
3126 Changed = true;
3127 }
3128 }
3129 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003130
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003131 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
3132 if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) &&
3133 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
3134 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
3135 BB->eraseFromParent();
3136 return true;
3137 }
3138
3139 return Changed;
3140}
3141
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003142/// TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp - Turns a switch with that contains only a
3143/// integer range comparison into a sub, an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00003144static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003145 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003146
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003147 // Make sure all cases point to the same destination and gather the values.
3148 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> Cases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003149 SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin();
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003150 Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
3151 SwitchInst::CaseIt PrevI = I++;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003152 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); I != E; PrevI = I++) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003153 if (PrevI.getCaseSuccessor() != I.getCaseSuccessor())
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003154 return false;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003155 Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003156 }
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003157 assert(Cases.size() == SI->getNumCases() && "Not all cases gathered");
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00003158
3159 // Sort the case values, then check if they form a range we can transform.
3160 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3161 for (unsigned I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3162 if (Cases[I-1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue()+1)
3163 return false;
3164 }
3165
3166 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(Cases.back());
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003167 Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), SI->getNumCases());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003168
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003169 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
3170 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Devang Patel3015a542011-05-19 00:13:33 +00003171 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName()+".off");
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00003172 Value *Cmp;
3173 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
3174 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && SI->getNumCases() != 0)
3175 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
3176 else
3177 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003178 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003179 Cmp, SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor(), SI->getDefaultDest());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003180
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003181 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
3182 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3183 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3184 if (HasWeights) {
3185 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3186 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3187 // Combine all weights for the cases to be the true weight of NewBI.
3188 // We assume that the sum of all weights for a Terminator can fit into 32
3189 // bits.
3190 uint32_t NewTrueWeight = 0;
3191 for (unsigned I = 1, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I)
3192 NewTrueWeight += (uint32_t)Weights[I];
3193 NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3194 MDBuilder(SI->getContext()).
3195 createBranchWeights(NewTrueWeight,
3196 (uint32_t)Weights[0]));
3197 }
3198 }
3199
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003200 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successor's PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003201 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor()->begin();
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003202 isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003203 for (unsigned I = 0, E = SI->getNumCases()-1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00003204 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
3205 }
3206 SI->eraseFromParent();
3207
3208 return true;
3209}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00003210
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003211/// EliminateDeadSwitchCases - Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
3212/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Hal Finkel60db0582014-09-07 18:57:58 +00003213static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, const DataLayout *DL,
3214 AssumptionTracker *AT) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003215 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00003216 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003217 APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0);
Hal Finkel60db0582014-09-07 18:57:58 +00003218 computeKnownBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne, DL, 0, AT, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003219
3220 // Gather dead cases.
3221 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases;
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003222 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003223 if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 ||
3224 (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) {
3225 DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003226 DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '"
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003227 << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003228 }
3229 }
3230
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003231 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3232 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3233 if (HasWeight) {
3234 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3235 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
3236 }
3237
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003238 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
3239 for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003240 SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]);
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003241 assert(Case != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00003242 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003243 if (HasWeight) {
3244 std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back());
3245 Weights.pop_back();
3246 }
3247
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003248 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003249 Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003250 SI->removeCase(Case);
3251 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00003252 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00003253 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
3254 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof,
3255 MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).
3256 createBranchWeights(MDWeights));
3257 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00003258
3259 return !DeadCases.empty();
3260}
3261
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003262/// FindPHIForConditionForwarding - If BB would be eligible for simplification
3263/// by TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
3264/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
3265/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
3266/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
3267static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
3268 BasicBlock *BB,
3269 int *PhiIndex) {
3270 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003271 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003272 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003273 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003274
3275 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
3276 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003277 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003278
3279 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
3280
3281 BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin();
3282 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3283 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
3284 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
3285
3286 Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3287 if (InValue != CaseValue) continue;
3288
3289 *PhiIndex = Idx;
3290 return PHI;
3291 }
3292
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003293 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003294}
3295
3296/// ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI - Try to forward the condition of a switch
3297/// instruction to a phi node dominated by the switch, if that would mean that
3298/// some of the destination blocks of the switch can be folded away.
3299/// Returns true if a change is made.
3300static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
3301 typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap;
3302 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
3303
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003304 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy5b648af2012-03-08 07:06:20 +00003305 ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue();
3306 BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor();
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003307
3308 int PhiIndex;
3309 PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest,
3310 &PhiIndex);
3311 if (!PHI) continue;
3312
3313 ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex);
3314 }
3315
3316 bool Changed = false;
3317
3318 for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(),
3319 E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
3320 PHINode *Phi = I->first;
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003321 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00003322
3323 if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue;
3324
3325 for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I)
3326 Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition());
3327 Changed = true;
3328 }
3329
3330 return Changed;
3331}
3332
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003333/// ValidLookupTableConstant - Return true if the backend will be able to handle
3334/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Hans Wennborg08238ad2012-09-07 08:22:57 +00003335static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00003336 if (C->isThreadDependent())
3337 return false;
3338 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
3339 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003340
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00003341 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C))
3342 return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing();
3343
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003344 return isa<ConstantFP>(C) ||
3345 isa<ConstantInt>(C) ||
3346 isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) ||
3347 isa<GlobalValue>(C) ||
3348 isa<UndefValue>(C);
3349}
3350
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003351/// LookupConstant - If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003352/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003353static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V,
3354 const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) {
3355 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
3356 return C;
3357 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
3358}
3359
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003360/// ConstantFold - Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
3361/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
3362/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003363/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003364static Constant *
3365ConstantFold(Instruction *I,
3366 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool,
3367 const DataLayout *DL) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003368 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003369 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
3370 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003371 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003372 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
3373 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
3374 if (A->isNullValue())
3375 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003376 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003377 }
3378
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003379 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
3380 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
3381 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
3382 COps.push_back(A);
3383 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003384 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003385 }
3386
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003387 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I))
3388 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
3389 COps[1], DL);
3390
3391 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I->getOpcode(), I->getType(), COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003392}
3393
3394/// GetCaseResults - Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
3395/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00003396/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003397/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003398static bool
3399GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI,
3400 ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3401 BasicBlock *CaseDest,
3402 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003403 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *> > &Res,
3404 const DataLayout *DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003405 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
3406 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
3407
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003408 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
3409 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
3410 SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool;
3411 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
3412 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E;
3413 ++I) {
3414 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) {
3415 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
3416 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1)
3417 return false;
3418 Pred = CaseDest;
3419 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
3420 } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3421 // Skip debug intrinsic.
3422 continue;
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00003423 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(I, ConstantPool, DL)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003424 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
3425 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(I, C));
3426 } else {
3427 break;
3428 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003429 }
3430
3431 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
3432 if (!*CommonDest)
3433 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
3434 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
3435 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
3436 return false;
3437
3438 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
3439 BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin();
3440 while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) {
3441 int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
3442 if (Idx == -1)
3443 continue;
3444
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00003445 Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx),
3446 ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003447 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003448 return false;
3449
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003450 // Note: If the constant comes from constant-propagating the case value
3451 // through the CaseDest basic block, it will be safe to remove the
3452 // instructions in that block. They cannot be used (except in the phi nodes
3453 // we visit) outside CaseDest, because that block does not dominate its
3454 // successor. If it did, we would not be in this phi node.
3455
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003456 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
3457 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal))
3458 return false;
3459
3460 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal));
3461 }
3462
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003463 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003464}
3465
Marcello Maggioni963bc872014-10-07 18:16:44 +00003466// MapCaseToResult - Helper function used to
3467// add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate Result.
3468static void MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
3469 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3470 Constant *Result) {
3471 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
3472 if (I.first == Result) {
3473 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
3474 return;
3475 }
3476 }
3477 UniqueResults.push_back(std::make_pair(Result,
3478 SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
3479}
3480
3481// InitializeUniqueCases - Helper function that initializes a map containing
3482// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
3483// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
3484// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
3485static bool InitializeUniqueCases(
3486 SwitchInst *SI, const DataLayout *DL, PHINode *&PHI,
3487 BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
3488 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
3489 Constant *&DefaultResult) {
3490 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
3491 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
3492
3493 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
3494 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
3495 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
3496 DL))
3497 return false;
3498
3499 // Only one value per case is permitted
3500 if (Results.size() > 1)
3501 return false;
3502 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
3503
3504 // Check the PHI consistency.
3505 if (!PHI)
3506 PHI = Results[0].first;
3507 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
3508 return false;
3509 }
3510 // Find the default result value.
3511 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
3512 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
3513 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
3514 DL);
3515 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
3516 // is unreachable.
3517 DefaultResult =
3518 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
3519 if ((!DefaultResult &&
3520 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
3521 return false;
3522
3523 return true;
3524}
3525
3526// ConvertTwoCaseSwitch - Helper function that checks if it is possible to
3527// transform a switch with only two cases (or two cases + default)
3528// that produces a result into a value select.
3529// Example:
3530// switch (a) {
3531// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
3532// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
3533// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
3534// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
3535// default:
3536// return 4;
3537// }
3538static Value *
3539ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
3540 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
3541 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3542 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
3543 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
3544 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
3545 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
3546 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
3547 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
3548 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
3549 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
3550
3551 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
3552 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
3553 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
3554 Value *const ValueCompare =
3555 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
3556 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
3557 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
3558 }
3559 Value *const ValueCompare =
3560 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
3561 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first, SelectValue,
3562 "switch.select");
3563 }
3564
3565 return nullptr;
3566}
3567
3568// RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion - Helper function to cleanup a switch
3569// instruction that has been converted into a select, fixing up PHI nodes and
3570// basic blocks.
3571static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
3572 Value *SelectValue,
3573 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
3574 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
3575 if (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
3576 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
3577 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
3578
3579 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
3580
3581 // Remove the switch.
3582 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
3583 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
3584
3585 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
3586 continue;
3587 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
3588 }
3589 SI->eraseFromParent();
3590}
3591
3592/// SwitchToSelect - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
3593/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
3594/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
3595static bool SwitchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3596 const DataLayout *DL, AssumptionTracker *AT) {
3597 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
3598 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
3599 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
3600 Constant *DefaultResult;
3601 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
3602 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
3603 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, DL, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults,
3604 DefaultResult))
3605 return false;
3606 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
3607 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
3608 return false;
3609 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
3610
3611 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
3612 Value *SelectValue = ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(
3613 UniqueResults,
3614 DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
3615 if (SelectValue) {
3616 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
3617 return true;
3618 }
3619 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
3620 return false;
3621}
3622
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003623namespace {
3624 /// SwitchLookupTable - This class represents a lookup table that can be used
3625 /// to replace a switch.
3626 class SwitchLookupTable {
3627 public:
3628 /// SwitchLookupTable - Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement
3629 /// with the contents of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the
3630 /// table.
3631 SwitchLookupTable(Module &M,
3632 uint64_t TableSize,
3633 ConstantInt *Offset,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003634 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003635 Constant *DefaultValue,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003636 const DataLayout *DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003637
3638 /// BuildLookup - Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
3639 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003640 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003641
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003642 /// WouldFitInRegister - Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
3643 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003644 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003645 uint64_t TableSize,
3646 const Type *ElementType);
3647
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003648 private:
3649 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
3650 // different ways.
3651 enum {
3652 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
3653 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
3654 SingleValueKind,
3655
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003656 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
3657 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
3658 // shift and mask operations.
3659 BitMapKind,
3660
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003661 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
3662 // instructions from the table.
3663 ArrayKind
3664 } Kind;
3665
3666 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
3667 Constant *SingleValue;
3668
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003669 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
3670 ConstantInt *BitMap;
3671 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy;
3672
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003673 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
3674 GlobalVariable *Array;
3675 };
3676}
3677
3678SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(Module &M,
3679 uint64_t TableSize,
3680 ConstantInt *Offset,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00003681 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003682 Constant *DefaultValue,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003683 const DataLayout *DL)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003684 : SingleValue(nullptr), BitMap(nullptr), BitMapElementTy(nullptr),
3685 Array(nullptr) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003686 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
3687 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003688
3689 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003690 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003691
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003692 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
3693
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003694 // Build up the table contents.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003695 SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
3696 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3697 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
3698 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003699 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003700
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003701 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue())
3702 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003703 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
3704
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003705 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003706 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003707 }
3708
3709 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003710 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00003711 assert(DefaultValue &&
3712 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003713 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003714 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
3715 if (!TableContents[I])
3716 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003717 }
3718
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003719 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003720 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003721 }
3722
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003723 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
3724 // that single value.
3725 if (SingleValue) {
3726 Kind = SingleValueKind;
3727 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003728 }
3729
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003730 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003731 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003732 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003733 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
3734 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
3735 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00003736 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
3737 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
3738 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
3739 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
3740 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003741 }
3742 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
3743 BitMapElementTy = IT;
3744 Kind = BitMapKind;
3745 ++NumBitMaps;
3746 return;
3747 }
3748
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003749 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003750 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003751 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
3752
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003753 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true,
3754 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage,
3755 Initializer,
3756 "switch.table");
3757 Array->setUnnamedAddr(true);
3758 Kind = ArrayKind;
3759}
3760
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003761Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003762 switch (Kind) {
3763 case SingleValueKind:
3764 return SingleValue;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003765 case BitMapKind: {
3766 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
3767 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
3768
3769 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
3770 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
3771 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +00003772 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003773
3774 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
3775 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt,
3776 ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
3777 "switch.shiftamt");
3778
3779 // Shift down.
3780 Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt,
3781 "switch.downshift");
3782 // Mask off.
3783 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy,
3784 "switch.masked");
3785 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003786 case ArrayKind: {
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00003787 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00003788 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
3789 uint64_t TableSize = Array->getInitializer()->getType()
3790 ->getArrayNumElements();
3791 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
3792 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(Index,
3793 IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(),
3794 IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
3795 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00003796
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003797 Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index };
3798 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array, GEPIndices,
3799 "switch.gep");
3800 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
3801 }
3802 }
3803 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
3804}
3805
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003806bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003807 uint64_t TableSize,
3808 const Type *ElementType) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003809 if (!DL)
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003810 return false;
3811 const IntegerType *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
3812 if (!IT)
3813 return false;
3814 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
3815 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00003816
3817 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
3818 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth())
3819 return false;
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003820 return DL->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003821}
3822
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003823/// ShouldBuildLookupTable - Determine whether a lookup table should be built
Hans Wennborg5cf30be2013-06-04 11:22:30 +00003824/// for this switch, based on the number of cases, size of the table and the
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003825/// types of the results.
3826static bool ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003827 uint64_t TableSize,
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003828 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003829 const DataLayout *DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003830 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>& ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00003831 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
3832 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003833
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003834 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003835 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003836 for (SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>::const_iterator I = ResultTypes.begin(),
3837 E = ResultTypes.end(); I != E; ++I) {
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003838 Type *Ty = I->second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003839
3840 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003841 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003842
3843 // Saturate this flag to false.
3844 AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister &&
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003845 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00003846
3847 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
3848 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
3849 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
3850 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003851 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003852 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00003853
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00003854 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
3855 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
3856 return true;
3857
3858 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
3859 if (HasIllegalType)
3860 return false;
3861
3862 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
3863 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
3864 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
3865 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003866}
3867
3868/// SwitchToLookupTable - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
3869/// phi nodes in a common successor block with different constant values,
3870/// replace the switch with lookup tables.
3871static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00003872 IRBuilder<> &Builder,
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003873 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003874 const DataLayout* DL) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003875 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00003876
Hans Wennborgc3c8d952012-11-07 21:35:12 +00003877 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00003878 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables())
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00003879 return false;
3880
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003881 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
3882 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
3883
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003884 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
3885 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
3886 // string and lookup indices into that.
3887
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00003888 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make them
3889 // faster, so we don't analyze them.
3890 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003891 return false;
3892
3893 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
3894 // common destination, as well as the the min and max case values.
3895 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
3896 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
3897 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
3898 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
3899
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003900 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00003901 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003902 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
3903 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults;
3904 SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes;
3905 SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs;
3906
3907 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
3908 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue();
3909 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
3910 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
3911 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
3912 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
3913
3914 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
3915 typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy;
3916 ResultsTy Results;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00003917 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003918 Results, DL))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003919 return false;
3920
3921 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
3922 for (ResultsTy::iterator I = Results.begin(), E = Results.end(); I!=E; ++I) {
3923 if (!ResultLists.count(I->first))
3924 PHIs.push_back(I->first);
3925 ResultLists[I->first].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, I->second));
3926 }
3927 }
3928
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003929 // Keep track of the result types.
3930 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3931 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
3932 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
3933 }
3934
3935 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
3936 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
3937 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
3938 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
3939
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003940 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
3941 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00003942 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003943 bool HasDefaultResults = false;
3944 if (TableHasHoles) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003945 HasDefaultResults = GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(),
3946 &CommonDest, DefaultResultsList, DL);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00003947 }
3948 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
3949 if (NeedMask) {
3950 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
3951 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
3952 return false;
3953 if (!(DL && DL->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize)))
3954 return false;
3955 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003956
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00003957 for (size_t I = 0, E = DefaultResultsList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
3958 PHINode *PHI = DefaultResultsList[I].first;
3959 Constant *Result = DefaultResultsList[I].second;
3960 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003961 }
3962
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00003963 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003964 return false;
3965
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003966 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00003967 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003968 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
3969 "switch.lookup",
3970 CommonDest->getParent(),
3971 CommonDest);
3972
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003973 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00003974 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
3975 Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
3976 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003977
3978 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
3979 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003980 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00003981 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003982 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
3983 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
3984 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
3985
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00003986 // If we have a fully covered lookup table, unconditionally branch to the
3987 // lookup table BB. Otherwise, check if the condition value is within the case
3988 // range. If it is so, branch to the new BB. Otherwise branch to SI's default
3989 // destination.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003990 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = MaxTableSize == TableSize;
3991 if (GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
3992 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Manman Ren062f58d2014-08-02 23:41:54 +00003993 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs, to avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
3994 // do not delete PHINodes here.
3995 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
3996 true/*DontDeleteUselessPHIs*/);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00003997 } else {
3998 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00003999 MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004000 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4001 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004002
4003 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
4004 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004005
4006 if (NeedMask) {
4007 // Before doing the lookup we do the hole check.
4008 // The LookupBB is therefore re-purposed to do the hole check
4009 // and we create a new LookupBB.
4010 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
4011 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
4012 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(),
4013 "switch.lookup",
4014 CommonDest->getParent(),
4015 CommonDest);
4016
4017 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
4018 APInt MaskInt(TableSize, 0);
4019 APInt One(TableSize, 1);
4020 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
4021 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4022 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() -
4023 MinCaseVal->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
4024 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
4025 }
4026 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
4027
4028 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
4029 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
4030 // else continue with table lookup.
4031 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
4032 Value *MaskIndex = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy,
4033 "switch.maskindex");
4034 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex,
4035 "switch.shifted");
4036 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(Shifted,
4037 Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()),
4038 "switch.lobit");
4039 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
4040
4041 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
4042 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
4043 }
4044
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004045 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004046 for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4047 PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004048
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004049 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
4050 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004051 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultLists[PHI],
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004052 DV, DL);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004053
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00004054 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004055
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004056 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
4057 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004058 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
4059 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004060 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
4061 ReturnedEarly = true;
4062 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004063 }
4064
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00004065 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004066 }
4067
4068 if (!ReturnedEarly)
4069 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
4070
4071 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004072 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004073 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004074
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00004075 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00004076 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004077 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4078 }
4079 SI->eraseFromParent();
4080
4081 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00004082 if (NeedMask)
4083 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004084 return true;
4085}
4086
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004087bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004088 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
4089
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004090 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
4091 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4092 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
4093 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
4094 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004095 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004096
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004097 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
4098 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
4099 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004100 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00004101
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004102 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
4103 // away into any preds.
4104 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin();
4105 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4106 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4107 ++BBI;
4108 if (SI == &*BBI)
4109 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004110 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00004111 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004112
4113 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004114 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004115 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004116
4117 // Remove unreachable cases.
Hal Finkel60db0582014-09-07 18:57:58 +00004118 if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, DL, AT))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004119 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004120
Marcello Maggioni963bc872014-10-07 18:16:44 +00004121 if (SwitchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, AT))
4122 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
4123
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004124 if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004125 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004126
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004127 if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, TTI, DL))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004128 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004129
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004130 return false;
4131}
4132
4133bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
4134 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
4135 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004136
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004137 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
4138 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
4139 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
4140 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
4141 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest)) {
4142 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
4143 IBI->removeDestination(i);
4144 --i; --e;
4145 Changed = true;
4146 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004147 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004148
4149 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
4150 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
4151 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
4152 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4153 return true;
4154 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004155
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004156 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
4157 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
4158 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
4159 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
4160 return true;
4161 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004162
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004163 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
4164 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004165 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004166 }
4167 return Changed;
4168}
4169
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004170bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004171 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004172
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00004173 if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI))
4174 return true;
4175
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004176 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Rafael Espindolad07cf402014-07-30 21:04:00 +00004177 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004178 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
4179 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
4180 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004181
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004182 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison
4183 // against a constant, try to simplify the block.
4184 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
4185 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
4186 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
4187 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004188 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004189 TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, TTI,
4190 BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004191 return true;
4192 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004193
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00004194 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4195 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
4196 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
4197 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004198 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DL, BonusInstThreshold))
4199 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004200 return false;
4201}
4202
4203
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004204bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004205 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004206
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004207 // Conditional branch
4208 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
4209 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
4210 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
4211 // switch.
4212 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004213 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004214 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004215
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004216 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
4217 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4218 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin();
4219 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4220 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4221 ++I;
4222 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004223 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004224 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004225 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){
4226 ++I;
4227 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
4228 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
4229 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00004230 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004231 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004232 }
4233 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004234
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004235 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004236 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, DL, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004237 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004238
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00004239 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
4240 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
4241 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004242 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, DL, BonusInstThreshold))
4243 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004244
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004245 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
4246 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
4247 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
4248 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004249 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
4250 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00004251 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, DL))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004252 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004253 } else {
4254 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004255 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004256 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
4257 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4258 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00004259 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), DL))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004260 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004261 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004262 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004263 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00004264 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004265 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
4266 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
4267 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00004268 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), DL))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004269 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004270 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004271
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004272 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
4273 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
4274 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
4275 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004276 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004277 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004278
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004279 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004280 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
4281 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004282 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
4283 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004284 return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT) | true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004285
4286 return false;
4287}
4288
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004289/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
4290static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
4291 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
4292 if (!C)
4293 return false;
4294
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004295 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004296 return false;
4297
4298 if (C->isNullValue()) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00004299 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00004300 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004301
4302 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
4303 // control flow (eg. calls)
4304 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004305 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004306 return false;
4307
4308 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
4309 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
4310 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
4311 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
4312
4313 // Look through bitcasts.
4314 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
4315 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
4316
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004317 // Load from null is undefined.
4318 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004319 if (!LI->isVolatile())
4320 return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004321
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00004322 // Store to null is undefined.
4323 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00004324 if (!SI->isVolatile())
4325 return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004326 }
4327 return false;
4328}
4329
4330/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00004331/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004332static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
4333 for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin();
4334 PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i)
4335 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
4336 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) {
4337 TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
4338 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
4339 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
4340 BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i));
4341 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
4342 // destination from conditional branches.
4343 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4344 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
4345 else
4346 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) :
4347 BI->getSuccessor(0));
4348 BI->eraseFromParent();
4349 return true;
4350 }
4351 // TODO: SwitchInst.
4352 }
4353
4354 return false;
4355}
4356
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004357bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00004358 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004359
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004360 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004361 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004362
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004363 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
4364 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004365 if ((pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) &&
4366 BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00004367 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
David Greene725c7c32010-01-05 01:26:52 +00004368 DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
Chris Lattner7eb270e2008-12-03 06:40:52 +00004369 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004370 return true;
4371 }
4372
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004373 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
4374 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00004375 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004376
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00004377 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
4378 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
4379
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00004380 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
4381 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
4382
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00004383 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
4384 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
4385 // if there are no PHI nodes.
4386 //
4387 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
4388 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004389
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00004390 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
4391
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004392 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
4393 // eliminate it, do so now.
4394 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
4395 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00004396 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00004397
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004398 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004399 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004400 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00004401 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004402 } else {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004403 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004404 }
4405 } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004406 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true;
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +00004407 } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4408 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004409 } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004410 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004411 } else if (UnreachableInst *UI =
4412 dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4413 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00004414 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI =
4415 dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
4416 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00004417 }
4418
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00004419 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00004420}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004421
4422/// SimplifyCFG - This function is used to do simplification of a CFG. For
4423/// example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop, it
4424/// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization
4425/// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made.
4426///
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00004427bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004428 unsigned BonusInstThreshold,
Hal Finkel60db0582014-09-07 18:57:58 +00004429 const DataLayout *DL, AssumptionTracker *AT) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00004430 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BonusInstThreshold, DL, AT).run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00004431}